MX610 Series

User's Guide

May 2013 www.lexmark.com

Machine type(s):
7016
Model(s):
630, 670, 675

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Contents 2

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................................................................13
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................14
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................14

Understanding the printer control panel....................................................15

Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................15
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................15
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................16
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................18

Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................20

Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................20
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................21
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................21
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................22
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................22
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................22
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................22
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................23
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................24
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................24
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................25
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................26
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................26

Additional printer setup.............................................................................28

Installing internal options........................................................................................................................28
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................44
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................47

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Contents 3

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................48

Networking..............................................................................................................................................50
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................58

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................59

Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................59
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................59
Loading trays...........................................................................................................................................59
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................64
Using the standard bin and paper stop...................................................................................................69
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................70

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................73

Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................73
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................75
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................78

Printing......................................................................................................82
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................82
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device...........................................................................................83
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................85
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................87
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................87

Copying......................................................................................................89
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................89
Copying photos........................................................................................................................................90
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................90
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................91
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................97
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................97
Understanding the copy options.............................................................................................................98

E-mailing..................................................................................................100
Setting up the printer to e-mail.............................................................................................................100
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................101
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................102
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................103

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Contents 4

Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................104
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................104

Faxing......................................................................................................107
Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................107
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................121
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................124
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................124
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................126
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................126
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................127

Scanning...................................................................................................130
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................130
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................130
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................132
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................135

Understanding the printer menus............................................................138

Menus list..............................................................................................................................................138
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................139
Reports Menu........................................................................................................................................149
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................150
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................158
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................163
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................209

Saving money and the environment.........................................................210

Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................210
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................211
Recycling................................................................................................................................................215

Securing the printer..................................................................................216

Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................216
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................216
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................217
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................217
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................218

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Contents 5

Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................219

Maintaining the printer............................................................................220

Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................220
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................222
Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................222
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................222
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................224
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................225
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................231

Managing the printer...............................................................................232

Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................232
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................232
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................232
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................232
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................233
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................234

Clearing jams............................................................................................235
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................235
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................236
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................238
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx].............................................................................................238
[x]‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]..................................................................................................239
[x]‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]................................................................................................240
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]...........................................................................243
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]..........................................................................................244
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx].....................................................................................................245
[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave paper in bin. [45y.xx]...............................247

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................253
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................253
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................268
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................274
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................299
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................303

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Contents 6

Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................309

Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................314
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................314
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................315

Notices.....................................................................................................316
Product information..............................................................................................................................316
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................316
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................320

Index........................................................................................................333

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Safety information 7

Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Safety information 8

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 9

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions: Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
• Connecting the printer with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer: User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides may
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media be available on the Software and Documentation CD.
• Loading paper For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Instructions for: Networking Guide—Open the Software and
• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network Documentation CD, and then navigate to:
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems Documentation > User’s Guide and other publications >
Networking Guide
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.

Click ? to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 10

What are you looking for? Find it here

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer Lexmark support Web site—
support: http://support.lexmark.com
• Documentation Note: Select your country or region, and then select
• Driver downloads your product to view the appropriate support site.
• Live chat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
• E‑mail support site or on the printed warranty that came with your
• Voice support printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 11

4 1

3 2

1 Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3 Left side 203.2 mm (8 in.)
4 Rear 203.2 mm (8 in.)
5 Top 800 mm (31.49 in.)

Printer configurations
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 12

Basic model
2 3

5
7

6
1 Display
2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3 ADF tray
4 ADF bin
5 Standard bin
6 Multipurpose feeder
7 Standard 550‑sheet tray

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 13

Configured model

1
2

1 Optional 250‑sheet tray

2 Optional 550‑sheet tray
3 Optional stapler

Using the Embedded Web Server

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
If the printer is installed on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to do the following:
• View the virtual display of the printer control panel.
• Check the status of the printer supplies.
• Configure supply notifications.
• Configure printer settings.
• Configure network settings.
• View reports.
To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Notes:
– An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
– If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Learning about the printer 14

3 Press Enter.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including

two-sided (duplex) pages. Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF

When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer control panel 15

Understanding the printer control panel

Using the printer control panel

Use the To
1 Printer control panel • View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Press any hard button.
• Open a door or cover.
• Send a print job from the computer.
• Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
• Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
6 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7 Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
8 Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator

lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer control panel 16

Indicator light Printer status

Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light Printer status

Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode.
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.

Touch To
1 Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.
2 Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
3 Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
4 E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
5 FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
6 Arrows Scroll up or down.
7 Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.
8 Menu icon Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer control panel 17

Touch To
9 Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
10 USB Drive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
11 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
12 Status/Supplies • Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
14 Search held jobs Search for one or more of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types

Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
Example: path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings > Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.

Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Status message bar • Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer control panel 18

Feature Description
Printer IP address The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
Example: home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
123.123.123.123
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

7 6 5 4 3 2
Touch To
1 Arrows View a list of options.
2 Copy It Print a copy.
3 Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4 Home Go to the home screen.
5 Increase Select a higher value.
6 Decrease Select a lower value.
7 Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Other touch-screen buttons

Touch To
Accept Save a setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer control panel 19

Touch To
Cancel • Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Reset Reset values on the screen.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 20

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:
• Your home screen may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Finding the IP address of the computer

Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:
• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network

For Windows users

1 Open the command window.

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.
3 Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For Macintosh users

Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2 Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 21

3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.

4 Look for IPv4 Address.

Finding the IP address of the printer

Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 22 or see the documentation that came with the application.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 22

Understanding the different applications

Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 23.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
107.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 24.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 24.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 100.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 133.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 130.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 25.

Activating the home screen applications

Finding information about the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 21.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
• Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
• Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 23

Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Card Copy

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 24

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.

• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-
mail jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 25

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 20.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.

Setting up Scan to Network

Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
• Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 20.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 26

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network
printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other
print-related tasks.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
• To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Setting up and using the home screen applications 27

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:

a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
• To import a configuration file, do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 28

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options

• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware
Forms Barcode
Prescribe
IPDS
Printcryption
• Printer hard disk
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Parallel 1284‑B interface
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
– MarkNet N8350 802.11 b/g/n Wireless Print Server
– RS‑232‑C serial interface

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 29

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the controller board access door.

2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 30

1 Memory card connector

2 Option card connector
3 Printer hard disk connector
4 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port connector

4 Close the shield, and then the access door.

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Note: An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 31

3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

1
2

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.

5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 49.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 32

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controler board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 33

4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5 Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 49.

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 34

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Open the controller board access door.

2 Lightly press the stop on the left side of the access door, and then slide the access door to remove it.

1
2

3 Unpack the ISP kit.

Note: Make sure to remove and discard the small cable attached to the white connector.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 35

1 ISP solution
2 Screw to attach the ISP to the bracket
3 ISP exterior cover
4 Screws to attach the ISP metal bracket to the printer cage
5 Plastic bracket
6 Long ISP cable

4 Place the plastic bracket inside the ISP exterior cover until it clicks into place.

5 Slide and push the ISP solution into the plastic bracket.

1 2

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 36

6 Secure the ISP solution to the plastic bracket using the long screw.

7 Tighten the two screws on the end of the ISP solution.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 37

8 Attach the white plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the white receptacle on the ISP.

9 Attach the ISP exterior cover at an angle by inserting the left hinges first.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 38

10 Lower the rest of the cover, and then slide the cover to the right.

11 Run the ISP cable through the controller board shield.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 39

12 Open the shield using the green handle.

13 Attach the blue plug of the ISP solution interface cable into the blue receptacle on the controller board.
Note: If you have installed a printer hard disk, then you need to remove it. For more information, see
“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 43. To reinstall the printer hard disk, see “Installing a printer hard
disk” on page 40.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 40

14 Close the shield.

15 Close the ISP exterior cover.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 49.

Installing a printer hard disk

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Install the printer hard disk on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press
on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 41

a Using a flat‑head screwdriver, loosen the screws.

b Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plug and the receptacle are color‑coded blue.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 42

c Align the screws on the printer hard disk to the slots on the controller board bracket, and then slide the printer
hard disk onto the brackets.

d Tighten the two screws.

4 Close the controller board shield, and then close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 49.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 43

Removing a printer hard disk

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 29.
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
2 Loosen the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the controller board bracket.

3 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the receptacle in the controller board, leaving the cable attached
to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the
latch before pulling the cable out.

4 Hold the printer hard disk by the edges, and then remove it from the printer.
5 Close the controller board shield, and then close the access door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 44

Installing hardware options

Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
• Printer stand
• Optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
• Printer
For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup sheet that
came with the option.

Installing optional trays

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 45

2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.

3 Pull out the tray from the base.

4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.

5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 46

8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Notes:
• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 49.
• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer
until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 47

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing or scanning. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

3 2 1

Use the To
1 Printer power cord Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
socket
2 Power switch Turn the printer on or off.
3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
4 EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this
connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.
5 LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL filter,
or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send
and receive faxes.
6 USB port Attach a supported printer keyboard.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 48

Use the To
7 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
8 Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place.

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

Notes:
• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system > download your software
installer package
2 Do either of the following:
• If you are using the Software and Documentation CD, then insert the CD and wait for the installation dialog to
appear.
If the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

In Macintosh
Click the CD icon on the desktop.
• If you are using the downloaded software installer from the Web, then double‑click the installer that you have
saved in your computer. Wait for the Select Installation Type dialog to appear, and then click Install.
Note: If you are prompted to run your software installation package, then click Run.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 49

Updating available options in the printer driver

When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Do either of the following:
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 50

Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNetTM N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the
adapter.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network

For Windows users
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system > download your software
installer package
2 Do either of the following:
• If you are using the Software and Documentation CD, then insert the CD and wait for the installation dialog to
appear.
If the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 51

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
• If you are using the downloaded software installer from the Web, then double‑click the installer that you have
saved in your computer. Wait for the Select Installation Type dialog to appear, and then click Install.
Note: If you are prompted to run your software installation package, then click Run.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:
• From the printer control panel
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Install the printer driver on the computer.
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double‑click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.
4 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 52

d Click the IP tab.

e Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 53

Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 54

Using the Push Button Configuration method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 55

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.

Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.
• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.

For Windows users

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
3 To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
• Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4 Click the Ports tab.
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 56

6 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.

7 Click OK > Close.

For Macintosh users

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add

Setting up serial printing

Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 57

2 Install the printer driver.

a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system > download your software
installer package
b Do either of the following:
• If you are using the Software and Documentation CD, then insert the CD and wait for the installation dialog
to appear.
If the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
• If you are using the downloaded software installer from the Web, then double‑click the installer that you
have saved in your computer. Wait for the Select Installation Type dialog to appear, and then click Install.
Note: If you are prompted to run your software installer package, then click Run.
c Click Install.
d Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
e Select Advanced, and then click Continue.
f From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
g If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
h Click Continue > Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open Device Manager.

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Additional printer setup 58

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
b Double‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
c Do either of the following:
• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
• Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d From the menu that appears, select Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 59

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 235 and “Storing paper” on page 77.

Setting the paper size and type

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Notes:
• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.
• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.
• The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.

Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.

3 Select the width or height, and then touch .

Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause
a jam.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 60

2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 61

3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

LT L
R A4
LG

EX
EC
B5
2
A5

A6

A
4
LT
R
EX
EC
B5
A
5

Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab backward to
accommodate their length.
• When loading legal‑size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust.
To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more information, contact
customer support.
• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab toward the
center of the tray to the A6‑size position.
• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 62

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

• There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not, and whether two sided printing is needed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 63

Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher

One‑sided printing One‑sided printing

Two‑sided (duplex) printing Two‑sided (duplex) printing

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide. Overfilling
may cause paper jams.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 64

6 Insert the tray.

7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and paper type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card stock,
transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single‑page print jobs on letterhead.
1 Open the multipurpose feeder.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 65

a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 66

2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.

3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.

• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.

• Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and then fan
them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

4 Load the paper or specialty media.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 67

Notes:
• Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper
guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge
entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that the
transparencies came in.

Note: When loading A6‑size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the
edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 68

• Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two‑sided (duplex) printing, load
letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 69

• Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty
media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Using the standard bin and paper stop

The standard bin holds up to 150 sheets of 20‑lb paper. It collects prints facedown. The standard bin includes a paper
stop that keeps paper from sliding out the front of the bin as it stacks.
To open the paper stop, pull it so that it flips forward.

Note: Close the paper stop when moving the printer to another location.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 70

Linking and unlinking trays

When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer links those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and
different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.

Linking and unlinking trays

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 59.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 71

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.

3 Touch .
4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.

3 Touch .

Configuring a custom name

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Loading paper and specialty media 72

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch .

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 73

Paper and specialty media guide

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
– “Loading trays” on page 59
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 64

Tips on using transparencies

• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures
up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu,
then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 74

– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.
For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25‑psi (172‑kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the
label.
• Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive should be
at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the
warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2‑mm (0.06‑inches) strip on the leading and driver
edge, and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 75

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.

Weight
The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) bond grain long paper. The
optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120‑g/m2 (32‑lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose
feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163‑g/m2 (43‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb)
bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended to use 90 g/m2
(24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported only for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24–48
hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 76

For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically‑treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater or lesser than +/‑2.5 mm
(+/‑0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 77

Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 78

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

Supported paper sizes

Paper size and dimension Standard Optional 250‑ or Multipurpose ADF Scanner Duplex
550‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray feeder glass mode
Business card X X X X X

3x5 X X X X

4x6 X X X X

A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
A5 X
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
A6 X X
105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
JIS B5 X
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive X
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (México) X
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio X
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement X
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
*To support two‑sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the
Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 79

Paper size and dimension Standard Optional 250‑ or Multipurpose ADF Scanner Duplex
550‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray feeder glass mode
Universal*
76.2 x 76.2 mm to
215.9 x 359.92 mm
(3 x 3 in. to 8.5 x 14.17 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) X X X X X
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope X X X X X
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope X X X X X
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope X X X X X
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
C5 Envelope X X X X X
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
B5 Envelope X X X X X
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
Other Envelope X X X X X
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
*To support two‑sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the
Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

Supported paper types and weights

Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at a reduced speed.
Paper type Standard 250‑ or Multipurpose Duplex mode ADF Scanner glass
550‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray feeder
Plain paper

Card stock X X X

Transparencies X 1 X

1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.

2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 80

Paper type Standard 250‑ or Multipurpose Duplex mode ADF Scanner glass
550‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray feeder
Recycled

Paper labels X

Bond X X X

Envelope2

Rough envelope X X X

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper

Light paper

Heavy paper

Rough/Cotton X

Custom Type [x]

1 Transparencies are supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.

2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the optional finisher

Supported paper sizes
Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.) X
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) X
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.) X
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.) X

Oficio (México) 216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.) X

Universal 105 x 216 mm to 216 x 356 mm
X
(4.13 x 8.5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Paper and specialty media guide 81

Paper size Dimensions Staple finisher

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.) X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.) X
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.) X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.) X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.) X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.) X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to 176 x 250 mm
X
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

Supported paper types and weights

Paper type Staple finisher
Plain paper

Card stock X
Transparencies X
Recycled

Paper labels

Bond

Envelope X
Rough envelope X
Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored paper

Light paper

Heavy paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 82

Printing

Printing forms and a document

Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 22.
1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2 Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.

Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 83

Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.

Printing from a flash drive or mobile device

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 84

• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.

4 Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Printing from a mobile device

To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Supported flash drives and file types

Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 85

Recommended flash drives File type

• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB) Documents:

• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB) • .pdf
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB) • .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .jpeg or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .tiff or .tif
• .png
• .fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 86

2 Touch Submit.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 87

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Click Submit to save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Printing 88

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 89

Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press .

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 90

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > Photo >

3 From the Content Source menu, navigate to:

Photo/Film > > Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
4 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 91

3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:

Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >
4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It
5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select a new size for the copy > > Copy It

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 92

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Navigate to:

Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >
5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes

Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 93

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

4 Navigate to:

Copy to > Letter > > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.

4 Touch > Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 94

4 From the Scale area, touch or to decrease or increase the value by 1%.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

5 Touch .
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch > Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 95

Collated Not collated

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 94.
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• Off

5 Touch > Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 96

Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job

The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Custom Job > On > > Copy It
Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 97

Placing information on copies

Placing a header or footer on pages

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want
4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.

5 Touch , and then press .

Placing an overlay message on each page

An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > Done > Copy It

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF

When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 98

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy options

Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.

Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Copying 99

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut number.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the
document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 100

E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Configuring e‑mail settings

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 101

3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch .
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 102

E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on
page 22.

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:
• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want
to add.
• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add.
4 Touch Send It.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 103

Sending an e‑mail using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add, or search the address book.
5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings

Adding e-mail subject and message information

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.

Changing the output file type

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 104

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.
• XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.

5 Touch > Send It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options

Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 105

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 E-mailing 106

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you e‑mail the
document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 107

Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including

two-sided (duplex) pages. Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.

Notes:
• The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then press Continue.
• The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled but not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 108

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 322.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 109

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 110

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

PHONE LINE

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 111

Connected to different wall jacks

PHONE LINE

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 112

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

02

To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 113

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then
connect the telephone to the port.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 114

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

To connect:
1 Connect one end of a telephone cable to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. You may need to pay extra to your VoIP provider if
you want to activate the second phone port.
3 Remove the protective plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices but do not want to pay extra, then do not plug the printer into the
second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and
then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an
analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 115

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.

Notes:
• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 116

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 117

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.

Part name Part number

Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 118

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

LINE

EXT

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:
• The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
the port of the printer.
• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 119

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

N F N

PHONE LINE

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 120

3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
telephone system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch .

Setting the outgoing fax name and number

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 121

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail address,
use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the
printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22.

Sending a fax using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 122

3 From the home screen, touch Fax.

4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.
5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer

The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8 Click OK.

Notes:
• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number

Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 123

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book

The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the
address book feature, contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > > type the name of the recipient > Search
Note: You can search only for one name at a time.
4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
The time is increased or decreased in 30‑minute increments.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 124

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch .
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 125

Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 126

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning

• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 127

3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 128

Select from the following content sources:

• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Faxing 129

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Adjust ADF Skew—This straightens scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 130

Scanning
You can use the printer to send a file to an FTP address. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or
use the address book. You can also use the Multi-send or MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For
more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22.

Using Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 25.

Scanning to an FTP address

Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 131

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > > type a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:
• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch > Send It.

Scanning an FTP using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 132

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > > type the name of the recipient > Search
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch > Send It.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

You can use the printer to send a scanned file. You can also use Scan to Network, Multisend, and MyShortcut applications
from the printer home screen. For more information, see “Activating the home screen applications” on page 22.

ADF Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 133

4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer

Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder.

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.

b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 134

3 Select your printer from the list.

Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in
the TCP/IP section.
4 Click Next > Close.
5 Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
• Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
• Right‑click the printer you want to configure.
6 From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.
7 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
• Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
• Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
• Scan for E‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
• Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8 Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the
computer screen.

Scanning to a flash drive

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 135

Using the ScanBack Utility

You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan‑to‑computer profiles.
The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
1 Set up your scan‑to‑computer profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.
d Assign a file name of your scan profile, and then specify a location on your computer.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
Note: You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop.
2 Scan your original documents:
a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Held jobs > Profiles and Apps > select your scan profile
Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding the scan options

FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a number.

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 136

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Brochure—The original document is from a brochure.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Scanning 137

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options

Select from the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
scan the document.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 138

Understanding the printer menus

Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Default Source Menu Settings Page Active NIC Edit Security Settings
Paper Size/Type Device Statistics Standard Network2 Miscellaneous Security
Configure MP Stapler Test Standard USB Settings
Substitute Size Network Setup Page1 Parallel [x] Confidential Print Menu
Paper Texture Network [x] Setup Page Serial [x] Erase Temporary Data
Paper Weight Shortcut List SMTP Setup Files
Paper Loading Fax Job Log Security Audit Log
Custom Types Fax Call Log Set Date and Time
Custom Names1 Copy Shortcuts
Custom Scan Sizes E‑mail Shortcuts
Universal Setup Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report

Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu3

General Settings Print All Guides Fax Shortcuts A list of installed DLEs
Copy Settings Copy Guide E-mail Shortcuts (Download Emulators)
appears.
Fax Settings E‑mail Guide FTP Shortcuts
E‑mail Settings Fax Guide Copy Shortcuts
FTP Settings FTP Guide Profile Shortcuts
Flash Drive Menu Print Defects Guide
Print Settings Information Guide
Supplies Guide
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
3 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 139

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use To
Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Tray [x] Notes:
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper • Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use To
Tray [x] Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
A4 Notes:
A5
A6 • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
JIS‑B5
Letter • If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
Legal
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
Executive print job continues using the linked tray.
Oficio (Mexico) • The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose
Folio feeder.
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 140

Use To
Tray [x] Type Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
Recycled
Labels • If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
Vinyl Labels • Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Multipurpose Feeder Size Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
A4 Notes:
A5
A6 • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
JIS B5
Letter • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for Multipurpose
Feeder Size to appear as a menu.
Legal
Executive
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
Make sure to set the paper size value.
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 141

Use To
Multipurpose Feeder Type Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Recycled • From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for Multipurpose
Labels Feeder Type to appear as a menu.
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Paper Size Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
A4 Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
A5 default setting.
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 142

Use To
Manual Paper Type Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Plain Paper Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency • Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Recycled • From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Labels Type to appear as a menu.
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Envelope Size Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
7 3/4 Envelope Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
9 Envelope international factory default setting.
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Envelope Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Cassette Notes:
Manual
First • Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 143

Substitute Size menu

Use To
Substitute Size Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Off Notes:
Statement/A5
Letter/A4 • All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
All Listed
• Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper
message appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use To
Plain Texture Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Smooth Notes:
Normal
Rough • Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Recycled Texture Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Bond Texture Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 144

Use To
Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Rough
Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Heavy Texture Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Smooth Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Rough/Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Rough
Custom [x] Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Smooth Notes:
Normal
Rough • Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Use To
Plain Weight Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 145

Use To
Transparency Weight Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Labels Weight Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Light
Heavy Weight Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Heavy

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 146

Use To
Rough/Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Light Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Custom [x] Weight Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Light Notes:
Normal
Heavy • Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use To
Card Stock Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Card Stock as the paper type.
Off
Recycled Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Recycled as the paper type.
Off
Labels Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Labels as the paper type.
Off
Bond Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Bond as the paper type.
Off
Letterhead Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Letterhead as the paper type.
Off
Preprinted Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Preprinted as the paper type.
Off
Colored Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Colored as the paper type.
Off
Light Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Light as the paper type.
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 147

Use To
Heavy Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Heavy as the paper type.
Off
Rough/Cotton Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Rough or Cotton as the paper type.
Off
Custom [x] Loading Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Duplex Custom [x] as the paper type.
Off Note: Custom [x] Loading appears only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Preferences in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Custom Types menu

Use To
Custom Type [x] Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default
Paper custom type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the
Card Stock Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Recycled Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 148

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use To
Custom Scan Size [x] Specify a custom scan size name and page orientation.
Scan Size Name Notes:
Width
Height • The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer
menus.
Orientation
Portrait • ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.
Landscape
2 scans per side
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.
Off
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
On
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu

Use To
Units of Measure Identify the units of measure.
Inches Notes:
Millimeters
• Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width Set the portrait width.
3–14.17 inches Notes:
76–360 mm
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height Set the portrait height.
3–14.17 inches Notes:
76–360 mm
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 149

Use To
Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Short Edge Notes:
Long Edge
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports Menu

Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection,
and other information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer,
such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 150

Use To
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and
installed correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use To
Active NIC Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
[list of available network cards]
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
On it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
On regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 151

Use To
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Auto Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer Set the size of the network input buffer.
Auto Notes:
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On Notes:
Off
Auto • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup or Display and set the printer network settings.
Network [x] Setup Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
Reports network.
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 152

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status View the connection status of the network card.
Connected
Disconnected
View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card.
Network Address View the network addresses.
UAA
LAA
Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0–255 seconds Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 153

Use To
Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable AutoIP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable FTP/TFTP Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Yes Protocol.
No Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
No Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS View or change the current DDNS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable mDNS View or change the current mDNS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No

IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6 Enable IPv6 in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 154

Use To
Auto Configuration Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the
On automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Hostname Set the host name.
View Address Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6 Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off

Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network
adapter attached.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security.
Start Push Button Method Notes:
Start PIN Method
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
Enable WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Disable Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode Specify the network mode.
BSS Type Notes:
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
802.11b/g Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 155

Use To
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use To
PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
On through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
On through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Off Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 156

Use To
NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Disabled Notes:
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed] • Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Off Notes:
On
Auto • Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On Notes:
Off
Auto • Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 157

Use To
ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

SMTP Setup menu

Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
5–30 send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
Disabled SMTP server.
Negotiate Notes:
Required
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
No authentication required privileges.
Login/Plain Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 158

Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
None server.
Use Device SMTP Credentials Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail • None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
None User‑Initiated E‑mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials • “Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the
Use Session User ID and Password SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu

Edit Security Setups menu

Note: This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Edit Backup Password Create a backup password.
Use Backup Password Notes:
• Off
• Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• On
• This menu appears only if a backup password exists.
Password
Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Internal Accounts Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template.
[list of available templates]

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 159

Use To
Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
Administrative Menus points.
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use To
Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
Login failures panel before all users are locked out.
Failure time frame Notes:
Lockout time
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
Panel Login Timeout
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.
Remote Login Timeout
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper Change the value of the security settings.
Access controls=”No Security” Notes:
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults • Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 160

Use To
LDAP Certificate Verification Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Demand Notes:
Try
Allow • “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
Never
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the PIN.
1–16 Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.

Confidential Print menu

Use To
Max Invalid PIN Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Off Notes:
2–10
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Off Notes:
1 hour
4 hours • If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
24 hours
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 161

Use To
Verify Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Reserve Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Erase Temporary Data Files menu

Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Auto
Automatic Method Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
Single pass system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Multiple pass Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without
having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.

Security Audit Log menu

Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 162

Use To
Delete Log Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Configure Log Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Enable Audit Notes:
Yes
No • Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
Enable Remote Syslog
No • Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
0–23
• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
Severity of events to log
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
0–7

Set Date/Time menu

Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
On associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup Enable the user to set up the time zone.
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable NTP Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
On network.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 163

Use To
Enable Authentication Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use To
Display Language Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
English Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
Francais need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Eco-Mode Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Off Notes:
Energy
Energy/Paper • Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
Paper
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 164

Use To
ADF Loaded Beep Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
Enabled loaded.
Disabled Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
ADF Multi‑feed Sensor Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Quiet Mode Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full‑speed
printing.
Run Initial setup Set the printer to run the setup wizard.
Yes Notes:
No
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 165

Use To
Keyboard Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
Keyboard Type keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
English symbols from the keyboard.
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Paper Sizes Specify the default system of measurement for paper sizes.
US Notes:
Metric
• US is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this also changes the default setting for each input
source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
[port range] firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: “9751:12000” is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 166

Use To
Displayed Information Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
Left side home screen.
Right side For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
Custom Text [x] options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”
Displayed Information (continued) Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Black Toner Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”
• Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 167

Use To
Displayed Information (continued) Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper,
Paper Jam and Service Errors menus.
Load Paper Select from the following options:
Service Errors Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Home screen customization Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
Change Language For each icon, select from the following options:
Copy Display
Copy Shortcuts Do not display
Fax
Notes:
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail • Display is the factory default setting for the Copy, Fax,
E‑mail, FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held Jobs, USB Drive, and
E‑mail Shortcuts
Forms and Favorites menus.
FTP
• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for the Change
FTP Shortcuts
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E‑mail Shortcuts,
Search Held Jobs FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and “Jobs
Held Jobs by user” menus.
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Date Format Format the printer date.
MM‑DD‑YYYY Notes:
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD • MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format Format the printer time.
12 hour A.M./P.M. Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
24 hour clock

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 168

Use To
Screen Brightness Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.
20–100 Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Output Lighting Set the amount of light from the standard output bin.
Normal/Standby Mode Notes:
Off
Dim • Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.
Bright
• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set
to Paper.
Error Lighting Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters
On errors.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Button Feedback Notes:
On
Off • On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
Volume • 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
1–10
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback Provide touch‑screen sensation feedback.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Show Bookmarks Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
No bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background Removal Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
On e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans Scan multiple jobs to one file.
On Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Off Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
Job level in the ADF.
Page level Notes:
• Job level is the factory default setting.
• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 169

Use To
Web Page Refresh Rate Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
30–300 refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.
Alarm Control When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times
Cartridge Alarm that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing
when a cartridge‑low condition occurs.
Staple Alarm
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm and
Staple Alarm. This means no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
Standby Mode enters a lower power state.
Disabled Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
1–240
Timeouts Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
Sleep Mode printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Disabled Notes:
1–180
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 170

Use To
Timeouts Set the printer to operate at a low power state.
Timeout Notes:
Disabled
1–3 hours • Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries except
in European Union countries and Switzerland.
6 hours
1–3 days • “3 days” is the factory default setting in European Union
countries and Switzerland.
1–2 weeks
1 month
Timeouts Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Hibernate Timeout on Connection Ethernet or phone connection.
Hibernate Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Do Not Hibernate
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
Screen Timeout returning the printer display to Ready state.
15–300 Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts Show a message that lets you reset the screen timeout timer
Prolong Screen Timeout instead of returning to the home screen.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
Print Timeout end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
Disabled job.
1–255 Notes:
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job.
Disabled Notes:
15–65535
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 171

Use To
Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
5–255 continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery Automatically reboot the printer.
Auto Reboot Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Error Recovery Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
Max Auto Reboots perform.
1–20 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
Auto Continue situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Disabled Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
5–255
Print Recovery Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Jam Recovery Notes:
On
Off • Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
Auto
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.
Jam Assist Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Print Recovery Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
Page Protect otherwise.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds to a short press of the Sleep
Do Nothing button when the printer is idle.
Sleep Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Hibernate

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 172

Use To
Press and Hold Sleep Button Determine how the printer responds to a long press of the Sleep
Do Nothing button when the printer is idle.
Sleep Notes:
Hibernate
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
• Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to
enter Hibernate mode.
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
Factory Defaults Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Do Not Restore Notes:
Restore Now
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

Copy Settings menu

Use To
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 173

Use To
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then
1 sided to 1 sided specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
1 sided to 2 sided Notes:
2 sided to 1 sided
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
2 sided to 2 sided
will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
2‑up Portrait
4‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Landscape
Print Page Borders Specify whether or not a border is printed.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Collate Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Staple Enable or disable the staple finisher.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 174

Use To
Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document.
Letter Notes:
Legal
Executive • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Folio • A4 is the international factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Copy To Source Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Auto Size Match
Multipurpose Feeder
Transparency Separators Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Separator Sheets Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheet.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Darkness Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
1–999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 175

Use To
Header/Footer Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.
[Location] For the location, select from the following options:
Off • Top left
Date/Time • Top middle
Page number
• Top right
Custom text
• Bottom left
Print on
All pages • Bottom middle
First page only • Bottom right
All but first page Notes:
Custom text
• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Confidential Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Custom Job scanning Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 176

Use To
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for each
Color Dropout color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
0–5 Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
On
Scan edge to edge Specify if the original document is scanned edge‑to‑edge prior to faxing.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy Create a sample copy of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

Fax Settings menu

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
Note: The fax function is available only in select printer models.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 177

Use To
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID Specify how the fax is identified.
Fax Name
Fax Number
Enable Manual Fax Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
All receive Notes:
Mostly receive
Equal • Equal is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
Mostly send
All send • “Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.
Allow Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Don't Allow
Caller ID Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Off
Primary
Alternate
Fax number masking Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Off Notes:
From left
From right • Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Digits to Mask Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
0–58 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 178

Use To
Fax Cover Page Configure the fax cover page.
Fax Cover Page Notes:
Off by default
On by default • “Off by default” is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
Never use • Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Use To
Resolution Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
Standard increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Fine 200 dpi Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 179

Use To
Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document.
Letter Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 180

Use To
Dialing Prefix Rules Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Prefix Rule [x]
Automatic Redial Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
0–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency Specify the number of minutes between redials.
1–200 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Yes Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
Enable ECM Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Enable Fax Scans Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Driver to fax Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Yes Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Allow Save as Shortcut Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Dial Mode Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or as a pulse.
Tone Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Pulse
Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
2400 Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 181

Use To
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
0–5 Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto Notes:
Off
On • Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.
Scan edge to edge Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the
‑4 to 4 default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off

Use To
Enable Fax Receive Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Fax Job Waiting Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
None resources.
Toner Note: None is the factory default setting.
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
1–25 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 182

Use To
Auto Reduction Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
On fax source.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Sides (Duplex) Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a print duplexer is installed.
Separator Sheets Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Before Job
After Job
Separator Sheet Source Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Fax Footer Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Max Speed Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
2400 Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Print Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Print and Forward
Forward
Forward to Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.
Fax Notes:
E‑mail
FTP • Fax is the factory default setting.
LDSS • This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.
eSF
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Note: You can enter up to 16 characters.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 183

Use To
Block No Name Fax Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
Off specified.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Note: You can enter up to 512 characters.

Use To
Transmission Log Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Print log Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Print Never Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Logs Display Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
Remote Station Name name returned.
Dialed Number Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log Enable access to the Fax Job log.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Enable Call Log Enable access to the Fax Call log.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off

Use To
Speaker Mode Specify the mode of the speaker.
Always Off Notes:
On until Connected
Always On • On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax
connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume Control the volume setting.
High Note: High is the factory default setting.
Low

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 184

Use To
Ringer Volume Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
On

Use To
All Rings Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Single Ring Only Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

E‑mail Settings menu

Use To
E‑mail Server Setup Specify e‑mail server information.
Subject Notes:
Message
File Name • You can enter up to 255 characters in the Subject field.
• You can enter up to 512 characters in the Message field.
• You can enter up to 53 characters in the File Name field.
E‑mail Server Setup Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Send me a copy Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
E‑mail Server Setup Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.
Max E‑mail size Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
0–65535 KB
E‑mail Server Setup Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
Size Error Message Note: You can enter up to 1024 characters.
E‑mail Server Setup Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
Limit destinations destinations only to that domain name.
Note: You can specify only one domain.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 185

Use To
E‑mail Server Setup Define the e‑mail server path name, for example: /directory/path.
Web Link Setup Notes:
Server
Login • The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Password • You can enter up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web
Path Link.
File Name • You can enter up to 53 characters for File Name.
Web Link
Format Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF (.pdf) Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color Specify whether copies are printed in color.
Off
On
Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
75 dpi Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 186

Use To
Orientation Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Original Size Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Letter Notes:
Legal
Executive • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Folio • A4 is the international factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Best for content Notes:
5–90
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
5–90 image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 187

Use To
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as Specify how the images are sent.
Attachment Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Web Link
Use Multi‑Page Tiff Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
On multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
Off pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Print log Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
E‑mail Bit Depth Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
1 bit Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
8 bit
Custom Job scanning Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
On Notes:
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 188

Use To
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Cyan‑Red
Magenta-Green
Yellow-Blue
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning and to adjust the dropout setting for
Color Dropout each color threshold.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast of the output.
0–5 Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto Notes:
Off
On • Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only in select printer models.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
‑4 to 4 output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 189

Use To
Use cc:/bcc: Enable the use of the cc and bcc fields.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

FTP Settings menu

Use To
Format Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
PDF (.pdf) Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black/White Laser Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color Specify whether or not copies are printed in color.
Off Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Resolution Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
75 dpi Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 190

Use To
Orientation Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document.
Letter Notes:
Legal
Executive • Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Folio • A4 is the international factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long edge
Short edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
Best for content image.
5–90 Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
5–90 image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 191

Use To
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
On multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
Off or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Print log Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
FTP bit Depth Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
1 bit Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
8 bit
File Name Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
On Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Yellow‑Blue

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 192

Use To
Color Dropout Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much the dropout is increased
Color Dropout or decreased.
None Notes:
Red
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Green
Blue • 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast Specify the contrast of the output.
0–5 Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto Notes:
Off
On • Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is supported only in select printer models.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
‑4 to 4 output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 193

Flash Drive menu

Scan Settings
Use To
Format Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
PDF (.pdf) Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
1.2–1.7 Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A‑1a
Content Type Specify the content of the original document.
Text Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source Specify how the original document was produced.
Black and White Laser Note: “Black and White Laser” is the factory default setting.
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Resolution Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
75 dpi Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness Lighten or darken the output.
1–9 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 194

Use To
Original Size Specify the paper size of the original document.
Letter Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal default setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex) Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Off Notes:
Long Edge
Short Edge • Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Best for content Notes:
5–90
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90 Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90 Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 195

Use To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
On multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
Off or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name Type a base file name.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Scan Preview Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Background Removal Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
0–5 Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Negative Image Create a negative image of the original document.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Shadow Detail Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Sharpness Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5 Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
‑4 to 4 output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 196

Print Settings
Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
1–999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
1 sided Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
2 sided
Staple Specify whether prints are stapled.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Duplex Binding Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Long Edge Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Off Notes:
2‑Up
3‑Up • Off is the factory default setting.
4‑Up • The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Horizontal Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical • Horizontal is the factory default setting.
Vertical • Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 197

Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.

Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver Border Print a border on each page image.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
Solid
Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Off Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs • Off is the factory default setting.
Between Pages • Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x] Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print

Print Settings

Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language Set the printer language.
PCL Emulation Notes:
PS Emulation
• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 198

Use To
Job Waiting Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
On require unavailable printer options or custom settings.
Off Print jobs removed from the print queue are stored in a separate
print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing
information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that
stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area Set the logical and physical printable area.
Normal Notes:
Whole Page
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
This affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target Set the storage location for downloads.
RAM Notes:
Flash
Disk • RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• This menu setting appears only when a formatted, working
flash drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
On fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
Off job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 199

Use To
Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
Alphabetical when Print All is selected.
Oldest First Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
Newest First appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex) Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
1 sided Notes:
2 sided
• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Duplex Binding Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed in relation to page orientation.
Long Edge Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
1–999 Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print
Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2) Notes:
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
• “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.
• On stacks the print job in sequence.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 200

Use To
Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Off Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs • None is the factory default setting.
Between Pages • Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x] Notes:
Manual Feeder
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Off Notes:
2‑Up
3‑Up • Off is the factory default setting.
4‑Up • The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Horizontal Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical • Horizontal is the factory default setting.
Vertical • Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
Landscape landscape.
Portrait
Paper Saver Border Print a border when using Paper Saver.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
Solid
Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Off Notes:
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 201

Use To
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.

Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
300 dpi Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Pixel Boost Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
Off or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Fonts Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Toner Darkness Lighten or darken the printed output.
1–10 Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
On circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Off Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Auto Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Off
Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
‑6 to 6 by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
0–5 Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 202

Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Weekly Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Monthly
Log Action at End of Frequency Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
None Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Disk Near Full Level Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Off Full Action.
1–99 Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
None Notes:
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log • None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log • The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
Post Current Log triggered.
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Disk Full Action Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
None limit (100MB).
E‑mail & Delete Current Log Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 203

Use To
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Confidential Notes:
Held
Not Restored • Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
All
affected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash Format the flash memory.
Yes Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
No being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
Delete Now and parked jobs.
Do Not Delete Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 204

Use To
Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Off Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On

PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Yes Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
Annotations Print annotations in a PDF.
Do Not Print Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print

PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Lock PS Startup Mode Disable the SysStart file.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Font Priority Establish the font search order.
Resident Notes:
Flash/Disk
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 205

PCL Emul menu

Use To
Font Source Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Resident Notes:
Disk
Download • “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
Flash
All • “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Courier 10 Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set Specify the symbol set for each font name.
10U PC‑8 Notes:
12U PC‑850
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Point Size Notes:
1.00–1008.00
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Pitch Notes:
0.08–100
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Orientation Notes:
Portrait
Landscape • Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 206

Use To
PCL Emulation Settings Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Lines per Page Notes:
1–255
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
A4 Width Notes:
198 mm
203 mm • “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
Auto CR after LF a line feed (LF) control command.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
PCL Emulation Settings Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
Auto LF after CR carriage return (CR) control command.
On Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Tray Renumber Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
Assign MP Feeder different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Off Notes:
None
• “Off” is the factory default setting.
0–199
Assign Tray [x] • “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
Off
None
• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 207

Use To
Tray Renumber Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Restore Defaults
Yes
No

HTML menu
Use To
Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents.
Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font.
Apple Chancery Marigold
Arial MT MonaLisa Recut
Avant Garde Monaco
Bodoni New CenturySbk
Bookman New York
Chicago Optima
Clarendon Oxford
Cooper Black Palatino
Copperplate StempelGaramond
Coronet Taffy
Courier Times
Eurostile TimesNewRoman
Garamond Univers
Geneva Zapf Chancery
Gill Sans NewSansMTCS
Goudy NewSansMTCT
Helvetica New SansMTJA
Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 208

Use To
Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents.
1–255 pt Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents.
1–400% Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents.
8–255 mm Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Do Not Print Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Print

Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
On Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
Off for some images.
Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images.
On Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Anchor Top Left Notes:
Best Fit
Anchor Center • Best Fit is the factory default setting.
Fit Height/Width • When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Fit Height
Fit Width

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Understanding the printer menus 209

Use To
Orientation Set the image orientation.
Portrait Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape

Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 210

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For more information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode”
on page 211.

Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 235.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 211

Saving energy

Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper • Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.
3 Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise

Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 212

Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.
Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.

3 Touch .

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 213

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings

2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.

3 Touch Hibernate > .

Setting Hibernate Timeout

Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a
reduced power state.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer
to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.
4 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 214

Using the printer control panel

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout
2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.

3 Touch .

Using Schedule Power Modes

Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4 From the Time menu, select the time.
5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6 Click Add.

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Saving money and the environment 215

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

3 Touch .

Recycling

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Securing the printer 216

Securing the printer

Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Securing the printer 217

Erasing non‑volatile memory

• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Securing the printer 218

• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Securing the printer 219

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 220

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning the printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 221

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.

3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

1 White underside of the scanner cover

2 Scanner glass
3 ADF glass
4 White underside of the ADF cover

4 Close the scanner cover.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 222

Checking the status of parts and supplies

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume
future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page
content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 223

Ordering toner cartridges

Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Item Return Program cartridge
United States and Canada
Toner Cartridge 601
High Yield Toner Cartridge 601H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 601X
European Union, European Economic Area, and Switzerland
Toner Cartridge 602
High Yield Toner Cartridge 602H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 602X
Asia Pacific region (includes Australia and New Zealand)
Toner Cartridge 603
High Yield Toner Cartridge 603H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 603X
Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)
Toner Cartridge 604
High Yield Toner Cartridge 604H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 604X
Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe, and Commonwealth of Independent States
Toner Cartridge 605
High Yield Toner Cartridge 605H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 605X
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.

Item Regular cartridge

Worldwide
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 600XA

Ordering an imaging unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of
toner from toner cartridge.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 224

Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular

Imaging unit 500Z 500ZA

Ordering staple cartridges

Part name Part number
Staple cartridges 35S8500

Ordering a maintenance kit

Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance
kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.
Maintenance kit Part number
100‑V maintenance kit* 40X9147
110‑V maintenance kit 40X9137
220‑V maintenance kit 40X9138
* This is available only in Japan.

Ordering an ADF separator roller

Order an ADF separator roller when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.
For information on replacing the ADF separator roller, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
Part name Part number
Separator roller 40X9108

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 225

Replacing supplies

Replacing the toner cartridge

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.
4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 226

5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

6 Close the front door.

Replacing the imaging unit

1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 227

2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.

4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 228

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.

6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.

7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.

8 Close the front door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 229

Replacing the staple cartridge

1 Open the stapler door.

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

3 Hold both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, pull, and then lift the empty staple case from the cartridge.

1 2

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 230

4 Remove the spare staple case from its holder.

5 Insert the spare staple case into the staple cartridge.

1
2

6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

7 Replace the spare staple case for future use.

8 Close the stapler door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Maintaining the printer 231

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Managing the printer 232

Managing the printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e‑mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Managing the printer 233

Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web

Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.

Notes:
• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Managing the printer 234

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 58.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 217.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 235

Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When
there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.

• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 236

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the
standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting does not
guarantee that the page will print.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 237

9
2

3
1
4
2

8 3

7 6

Jam access area Printer control panel message What to do

1 Automatic [x]‑page jam, open ADF to clear Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the
document feeder jam. [28y.xx] jammed paper.
(ADF)
2 Standard bin [x]‑page jam, clear standard Remove the jammed paper.
bin. [20y.xx]
3 Front door [x]‑page jam, open front Open the front door, then remove the toner cartridge and
door. [20y.xx] imaging unit, and then the jammed paper.
4 Multipurpose [x]‑page jam, clear manual Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then
feeder feeder. [25y.xx] remove the jammed paper.
5 Tray 1 [x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap
duplex. [23y.xx] down, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: You may need to open the rear door to clear
some 23y.xx paper jams.
6 Tray [x] [x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx] Pull the indicated tray out, and then remove the jammed
paper.
7 Rear door [x]‑page jam, open rear Open the rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.
door. [20y.xx]
8 Finisher rear door [x]-page jam, remove all pages • Open the finisher rear door, and then remove the
from the finisher’s output bin. jammed paper.
Leave paper in bin [45y.xx]
• Open the narrow door, and then remove the jammed
paper.
9 Finisher output bin [x]-page jam, remove all pages • Move the left paper guide to the left and the right
from the output bin. Leave paper paper guide to the right, and then remove the jammed
in bin [45y.xx] paper from the finisher bin.
• Open the finisher rear door and the narrow door, and
then remove any jammed pages.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 238

[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]

1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 239

[x]‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

1 Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door.

2 Gently pull down the rear door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 240

4 Close the front and rear door.

5 From the printer control panel, select Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 241

2 Pull out the toner cartridge using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing
so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

4 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 242

5 Lift the green flap in front of the printer.

6 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

7 Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside
the printer, and then insert the imaging unit into the printer.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 243

8 Insert the toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer,
and then insert the cartridge into the printer.

9 Close the front door.

10 From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]

1 Pull out the tray completely.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 244

2 Locate the lever, and then pull it down to release the jam.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Insert the tray.

5 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]

1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 245

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

Note: Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]

1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 246

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 247

[x]-page jam, remove all pages from the output bin. Leave
paper in bin. [45y.xx]
Paper jam in the finisher bin
1 Empty the standard bin.

2 Move the paper guides to the sides.

3 Remove all jammed pages from inside the access areas.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 248

4 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Paper jam in the finisher rear door

1 Open the finisher rear door.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 249

3 Open the finisher narrow door, and then remove any paper fragments inside the narrow door.

4 Close the narrow door.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 250

5 Close the finisher rear door.

6 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Staple jam in the finisher

1 Open the staple access door.

2 Pull out the staple cartridge from the finisher.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 251

3 Lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.

4 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place.

5 Insert staple cartridge back into the finisher until it clicks into place.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Clearing jams 252

6 Close the staple access door.

7 If necessary, touch Done from the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 253

Troubleshooting
• “Understanding the printer messages” on page 253
• “Solving printer problems” on page 268
• “Solving print problems” on page 274
• “Solving copy problems” on page 299
• “Solving fax problems” on page 303
• “Solving scanner problems” on page 309
• “Solving home screen applications problems” on page 314
• “Embedded Web Server does not open” on page 314
• “Contacting customer support” on page 315

Understanding the printer messages

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

List of printer and toner cartridge regions

Region number Region
0 Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4 Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9 Invalid region

Notes:
• The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 254

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray or feeder, specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
• Cancel the print job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 255

Check tray [x] connection

Try one or more of the following:
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the indicated tray.
4 Reattach the tray.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Contact customer support.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.

Close rear door

Close the rear door of the printer.

Close finisher rear door

Close the rear door of the finisher.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 256

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]

Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job has been removed.
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]

Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device

From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 257

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax memory full

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Imaging unit low [84.xy]

You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 258

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]

If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]

You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Incompatible tray [x] [59]

Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 259

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.
• Cancel the current job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 260

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 261

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]

You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]

For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support,
and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Memory full [38]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.

Memory full, cannot print faxes

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

Network [x] software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 262

• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.

Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]

Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press
and hold and # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue printing.
If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Paper changes needed

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for each page to continue printing.
• Touch Use current supplies to continue printing using the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the current print job.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 263

Parallel port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Remove defective disk [61]

Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]

Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 264

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.

Replace all originals if restarting job.

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 265

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]

Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Restore held jobs?

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]

Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 266

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Some held jobs were not restored

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Standard network software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.

Standard USB port disabled [56]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job

Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.

Too many flash options installed [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 267

Too many trays attached [58]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Unformatted flash detected [53]

Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

USB port [x] disabled [56]

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 268

Solving printer problems

• “Basic printer problems” on page 268
• “Option problems” on page 270
• “Paper feed problems” on page 273

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Make sure the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode. to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the power cord into the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet. printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4 Unplug the other Go to step 5.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet. electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
Does other electrical equipment work?
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Step 5 Go to step 6. Make sure to match the
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted following:
in the correct ports. • The USB symbol on
the cable with the
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports? USB symbol on the
printer
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7.
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker. reset the breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 269

Action Yes No
Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power cord directly to
power supplies, or extension cords. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8 Go to step 9. Connect the printer
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer cable securely to the
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network printer and the
device. computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9 Go to step 10. Turn off the printer,
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing remove all packing
material. materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
on the printer.
removed?
Step 10 Go to step 11. Use correct printer
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver. driver settings.

Are the port settings correct?

Step 11 Go to step 12. Install the correct
Check the installed printer driver. printer driver.

Is the correct printer driver installed?

Step 12 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the support.
printer back on.

Is the printer working?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 270

Printer display is blank

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.

Does Ready appear on the printer display?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the and then contact
printer back on. customer support.

Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

Option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the internal
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board. option to the controller
board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is option.
listed in the Installed Features list.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 271

Action Yes No
Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Check if the internal option is selected. support.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 49.
b Resend the print job.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.

Is the tray working?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

Is the tray working?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer. more information, see
the setup
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
documentation that
Installed Features list.
came with the tray.

Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver. support.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 49.

Is the tray available in the printer driver?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 272

Cannot detect memory card

Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed. The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Install the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a support.
memory card” on page 30.
Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer
controller board.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the
Installed Options list.

Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Check if you have a
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed. supported ISP.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal Note: An ISP from
Solutions Port” on page 33. another printer may
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the not work on this
Installed Features list. printer.

Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check the cable and the ISP connection. support.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.

Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Check if you have a
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed. supported USB or
parallel interface card.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 33. Note: A USB or parallel
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel interface card from
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list. another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 273

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection. support.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.

Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?

Paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding support.
jams” on page 235.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 274

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper. Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Remove any jammed paper. support.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Does the paper jam message remain?

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery. The problem is solved. Contact customer
a From the home screen, navigate to: support.

> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
c Touch Submit.

Do pages reprint after a jam?

Solving print problems

Printing problems

Multiple‑language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.

Do the files print?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat. support.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.

Do the files print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 275

Error message about reading the flash drive appears

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port. into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.

Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?

Step 2 Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green. ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy. print the documents.

Is the indicator light blinking green?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Check for an error message on the display.
b Clear the message.

Does the error message still appear?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 84.

Does the error message still appear?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person. support.

Does the error message still appear?

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 276

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.

Do the jobs print?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more support.
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 48.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 277

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Select one of the Print
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your and Hold options, and
print job is listed. then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 86.
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.
b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.

Does the job print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Add additional printer
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs. memory.

Does the job print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 278

Print job takes longer than expected

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings

b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.

Did the job print?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job

Did the job print?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:

>Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect >
Off
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job. support.

Did the job print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 279

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Check if the trays are not linked. support.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Incorrect characters print

Action Yes No
Step 1 Deactivate Hex Trace Go to step 2.
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.

Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or support.
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.

Do incorrect characters print?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 280

Tray linking does not work

Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do the trays link correctly?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper support.
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.

Do the trays link correctly?

Large jobs do not collate

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 281

Action Yes No
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size support.
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Unexpected page breaks occur

Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout. The problem is solved. Check the original file
a From the home screen, navigate to: for manual page
breaks.
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.

Did the file print correctly?

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
c Resend the print job.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 282

Action Yes No
Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you support.
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
b Resend the print job.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Printer is printing blank pages

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 283

Action Yes No
Step 3 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Clipped pages or images

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper following:
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
size from the tray
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray? settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 284

Action Yes No
Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Reinstall the imaging unit. support.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Is the page or image clipped?

Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected

Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest
projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency.
Transparency.

Is the paper type setting correct?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.

Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and support.
then resend the print job.

Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?

Shadow images appear on prints

Leading edge

A
ABBCCDD
A B
ABCDC D
Trailing edge

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 285

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Load paper with the
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray. correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper loaded in the tray to
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Gray background on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if Allow Background Removal is set to Off.
a From the General Settings menu, set Allow Background Removal to
On.
b Resend the print job.

Did the background disappear from the prints?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 286

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Adjust the toner darkness to a lighter setting.
a From the Quality Menu, select a lower value to reduce toner density.
• 4 is the factory default setting.
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner
density and darkness for all print jobs.
b Resend the print job.

Did the background disappear from the prints?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Reinstall the toner cartridge.
a Remove the cartridge.
b Install the cartridge.
c Resend the print job.

Did the background disappear from the prints?

Step 4 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Check if off-white background is selected. support.
a Depending on your operating system, set off-white background from
Print Properties or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Did the background disappear from the prints?

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Are the margins correct?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 287

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to following:
match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
size from the tray
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray? settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from support.
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Are the margins correct?

Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for length guides.
the size of the paper loaded.

Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Specify the paper type
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight from the
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 288

Action Yes No
Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package. support.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the paper still curled?

Print irregularities
Leading edge

ABCDE
) )

ABCDE
ABCDE Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Specify the paper size
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper and type from the tray
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 4 From the printer Go to step 5.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes. control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
the paper loaded in the
tray.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 289

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
Do print irregularities still appear?
representative.

Repeating defects appear on prints

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. 1 Check if the
Measure the distance between the defects. distance between
Check for a distance between the defects that equals: the defects equal
to 80 mm (3.15 in.)
• 97 mm (3.82 in.)
2 Take note of the
• 47 mm (1.85 in.) distance, and then
• 38 mm (1.5 in.) contact customer
support at
Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements? http://support.le
xmark.com or
your service
representative.
Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support at
http://support.lexma
rk.com or your service
Do the repeating defects still appear?
representative.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 290

Print is too dark

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight following:
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
b Resend the print job. type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 4 From the printer Go to step 5.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes. control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 291

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 6 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the print still too dark?

Print is too light

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper type,
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in texture, and weight to
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 292

Action Yes No
Step 4 From the printer Go to step 5.
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes. control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still too light?

Step 7 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the print still too light?

Skewed print

)E
) D
ABC E
ABCD E
ABCD

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 293

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still skewed?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray. support.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print still skewed?

Printer is printing solid black pages

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 294

Transparency print quality is poor

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to Transparency.
match the paper loaded in the tray.

Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency. support.
b Resend the print job.

Is the print quality still poor?

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper type
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight to match
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. the paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 295

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in following:
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray. • Specify the paper
texture, type, and
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray? weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 296

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
representative.

Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 297

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 4 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 298

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Toner specks appear on prints

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. Contact customer The problem is solved.
support.
Do toner specks appear on prints?

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.
b Resend the print job.

Does fog or shading appear on prints?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 299

Action Yes No
Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
representative.

Toner rubs off

Leading edge

ABC
DEF
Trailing edge

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Specify the paper type
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight from the
and weight. tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 2 From the Paper menu Contact customer
Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes. on the printer control support.
panel, set the paper
texture.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Uneven print density

Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job. Contact customer The problem is solved.
support.
Is the print density uneven?

Solving copy problems

• “Copier does not respond” on page 300

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 300

• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 300

• “Poor copy quality” on page 301
• “Partial document or photo copies” on page 302

Copier does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back support.
on.

Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the The problem is solved. Contact customer
printer. support.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close properly?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 301

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Increase the scan
Check the quality of the original document. resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3 Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF scanner glass” on
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. page 221.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4 Go to step 5. See “Print quality
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems. problems” on
page 281.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
upper left corner.
glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Go to step 7.
Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher‑quality output.

Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?

Step 7 Go to step 8. Change the Content
Check the copy settings. Type and Content
Source settings to
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
match the document
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 302

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Check for patterns on print.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
b On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.

Do patterns appear on prints?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is solved.
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings:
• Improve sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
• Remove background—Reduce the current background removal
setting.
• Increase contrast—Increase the current setting.
• Decrease shadow—Reduce the current setting.

Do prints have missing or faded text?

Step 10 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output. support.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:
• Background removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow detail—Reduce the current background removal setting.
c Resend the copy job.

Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
upper left corner.
glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 303

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. Change the paper size
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the setting to match the
tray. paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
with paper that
Size setting.
matches the paper size
setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify support.
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Do copies print properly?

Solving fax problems

• “Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 303
• “Caller ID is not shown” on page 304
• “Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 304
• “Can send but not receive faxes” on page 306
• “Can receive but not send faxes” on page 307
• “Received fax has poor print quality” on page 308

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up

Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action Yes No
a From the home screen, navigate to: The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c Select a language, and then touch .

d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.

Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 304

Caller ID is not shown

Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is The problem is solved. Contact customer
subscribed to the caller ID service. support.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.

Does the caller ID appear?

Cannot send or receive a fax

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display. message.

Is there an error or status message on the display?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
Check the power. and then wait until
Ready appears on the
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
display.
on the display.

Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4 Go to step 5. Securely connect the
Check the printer connections. cables.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine

Are the cable connections secure?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 305

Action Yes No
Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Connect the printer to
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct an analog phone
digital connector. service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-
interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital

connector?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • Try calling the fax
Check for a dial tone. number to make
sure that it is
Did you hear a dial tone? working properly.
• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 306

Action Yes No
Step 8 The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 9 The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 10 The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 11 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Scan the original document one page at a time. support.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Can send but not receive faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

Can you receive faxes?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 307

Action Yes No
Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.

Can you receive faxes?

Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction support.
sheet that came with the supply.

Can you receive faxes?

Can receive but not send faxes

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.

Can you send faxes?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.

Can you send faxes?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 308

Action Yes No
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Set up the shortcut number properly. support.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.

Can you send faxes?

Received fax has poor print quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Step 2 The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 309

Action Yes No
Step 3 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Replace the toner cartridge. support.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Solving scanner problems

• “The scanner does not respond” on page 309
• “Scan job was not successful” on page 310
• “Scanner unit does not close” on page 311
• “Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 311
• “Poor scanned image quality” on page 312
• “Partial document or photo scans” on page 313
• “Cannot scan from a computer” on page 313

The scanner does not respond

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Check if the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Connect the printer
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the cable securely to the
computer, print server, option, or other network device. printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
network device.
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Connect the power
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly cord to the printer and
grounded electrical outlet. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4 Turn on the switch or Go to step 5.
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker. reset the breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 310

Action Yes No
Step 5 Connect the printer Go to step 6.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power cord directly to
power supplies, or extension cords. a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6 Unplug the other Go to step 7.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet. electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
Are the other electrical equipment working?
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
Step 7 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the support.
printer back on.

Are the printer and scanner working?

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Connect the cables
Check the cable connections. properly.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.

Are the cables securely connected?

Step 2 Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Check if the file name is already in use.

Is the file name already in use?

Step 3 Close the file you are Go to step 4.
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another scanning.
application or being used by another user.

Is the file you want to scan open in another application or being used by
another user?
Step 4 Go to step 5. Select the Append time
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check stamp or Overwrite
box is selected in the destination configuration settings. existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 311

Action Yes No
Step 5 The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
From the Flash Drive menu, reduce the scan resolution settings, and then
resend the scan job.

Does the job scan?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Change the Content
Check the scan settings. Type and Content
Source settings to
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
match the document
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

Scanner unit does not close

Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit. The problem is solved. Contact customer
a Lift the scanner unit. support.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved.
Select a lower scan resolution. support.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 312

Poor scanned image quality

Action Yes No
Step 1 Clear the error Go to step 2.
Check if an error message appears on the display. message.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Increase the scan
Check the quality of the original document. resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3 Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth scanner glass” on
dampened with water. page 221.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Place the document or
Check the placement of the document or photo. photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
upper left corner.
glass in the upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 5 Go to step 6. See “Print quality
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems. problems” on
page 281.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the toner darkness.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 6 Problem solved. Go to step 7.
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.

Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?

Step 7 Contact customer Change the Content
Check the scan settings. support. Type and Content
Source settings to
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
match the document
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
being scanned.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 313

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo. Contact customer Load the document or
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support. photo facedown on the
glass in the upper left corner. scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.

Does Ready appear before scanning the job?

Step 2 Clear the error Go to step 3.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the message.
printer back on.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 3 Contact customer Tighten the cable
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to support. connections.
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.

Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 314

Solving home screen applications problems

An application error has occurred

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Contact customer
Check the system log for relevant details. support.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Resolve the error. support.
Is the application working now?

Embedded Web Server does not open

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Type the correct
Make sure the printer IP address is correct. printer IP address in the
address field of your
View the printer IP address:
Web browser.
• From the printer home screen
Note: Depending on
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu the network settings,
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then you may need to type
finding the TCP/IP section “https://” instead of
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by “http://” before the
periods, such as 123.123.123.123. printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2 Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Check if the printer is turned on.

Is the printer turned on?

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Troubleshooting 315

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. Contact your system
Check if the network connection is working. support person.

Is the network connection working?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. connection.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.

Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5 Go to step 6. Contact your system
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers. support person.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.

Are the Web proxy servers disabled?

Step 6 The problem is solved. Contact customer
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support.
in the address field.

Did the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 316

Notices

Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX610de, MX611de, and MX611dhe
Machine type:
7016
Model(s):
630, 670, 675

Edition notice
May 2013
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2013 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 317

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 318

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing 55 dBA
Scanning 45 dBA
Copying 56 dBA
Ready N/A dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 319

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 320

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)

Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 640 W
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original 660 W
documents.
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 40 W
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 20 W
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 7W
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5 W
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned 0 W
off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 321

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and Disabled
Switzerland
Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 322

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。

この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and
2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-
related products.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 323

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 324

recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 325

Japanese telecom notice

The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE,
with Certification Number A11-0160001.

Lexmark International, Inc.

LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy‑related products.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 326

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type Model Number LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notice to users in Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial,
mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.
(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 327

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Taiwan NCC RF notice statement

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 328

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign
of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK

Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 329

Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 330

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 331

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Notices 332

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 333

Index
Numerics advanced options, touch‑screen Change [paper source] to [paper
250‑sheet tray e‑mail 106 type] [paper size] load
installing 44 answering machine [orientation] 254
550‑sheet tray setting up 109 Check tray [x] connection 255
installing 44 AppleTalk menu 155 checking an unresponsive
applications printer 268
home screen 22 checking status of parts and
Symbols understanding 22 supplies 222
[x]-page jam, remove all pages from attaching cables 47 checking the status of parts and
the output bin. Leave paper in bin. available internal options 28 supplies 222
[45y.xx] 247 avoiding jams 77 checking the virtual display
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. avoiding paper jams 235 using the Embedded Web
[25y.xx] 244 Server 232
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin.
[20y.xx] 238
B cleaning
blocking junk faxes 125 exterior of the printer 220
[x]‑page jam, open automatic scanner glass 221
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 238 buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen cleaning the printer 220
[x]‑page jam, open front door. Close finisher rear door 255
[20y.xx] 240 using 18
Close flatbed cover and load
[x]‑page jam, open rear door. originals if restarting job
[20y.xx] 239 C [2yy.xx] 255
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. cables Close front door 255
[24y.xx] 245 Ethernet 47 Close rear door 255
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear USB 47 collate
duplex. [23y.xx] 243 canceling copy options 99
print job, from computer 87 collating copies 94
A canceling a print job color quality troubleshooting
accessing the Embedded Web from a computer 87 prints on color transparencies
Server 21 from the printer control panel 87 appear dark when projected 284
Active NIC menu 150 canceling an e-mail 104 Complex page, some data may not
adapter plug 116 cannot open Embedded Web have printed [39] 256
ADF Server 314 confidential data
copying using 89 Card Copy information on securing 219
ADF separator roller setting up 23 confidential jobs
ordering 224 card stock modifying print settings 86
adjusting brightness loading, multipurpose feeder 64 confidential print jobs 85
Embedded Web Server 214 tips 74 printing from a Macintosh
printer control panel 214 Cartridge low [88.xy] 253 computer 86
adjusting copy quality 94 Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 254 printing from Windows 86
adjusting display brightness 214 Cartridge very low, [x] estimated Confidential Print menu 160
adjusting Sleep mode 212 pages remain [88.xy] 254 Configuration change, some held
adjusting toner darkness 82 Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch jobs were not restored [57] 256
administrator settings [41.xy] 253 configuration information
Embedded Web Server 232 Change [paper source] to [custom wireless network 52
advanced options string] load [orientation] 254 Configure MP menu 142
fax 129 Change [paper source] to [custom configuring
FTP 99 type name] load [orientation] 254 supply notifications, imaging
FTP options 137 Change [paper source] to [paper unit 233
size] load [orientation] 254

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 334

supply notifications, maintenance copy quality creating profiles

kit 233 adjusting 94 using the ScanBack Utility 135
supply notifications, toner copy screen custom name
cartridge 233 content source 99 configuring 71
configuring e‑mail settings 100 content type 99 Custom Names menu 147
configuring port settings 55 options 98 custom paper type name
configuring supply notifications 233 Copy Settings menu 172 assigning 71
connecting printer to distinctive copy troubleshooting Custom Scan Sizes menu 148
ring service 120 copier does not respond 300 Custom Type [x]
connecting to a wireless network partial document or photo changing paper type 71
using PIN (Personal Identification copies 302 creating custom name 70
Number) method 53 poor copy quality 301 Custom Types menu 147
using Push Button Configuration poor scanned image quality 312 customer support
method 53 scanner unit does not contacting 315
using the Embedded Web close 300, 311
Server 54 copying D
using wireless setup wizard 53 adding an overlay message 97 darkness
conservation settings adjusting quality 94 copy options 98
brightness, adjusting 214 canceling a copy job 97, 98 e‑mail options 105
conserving supplies 210 collating copies 94 fax options 128
Eco‑Mode 211 custom job 96 scan options 136
Hibernate Mode 213 different paper sizes 92 date and time, fax
Hibernate Timeout 213 enlarging 93 setting 121
Quiet Mode 211 inserting a header or footer 97 daylight saving time, setting 121
Schedule Power Modes 214 multiple pages on one sheet 95 Default Source menu 139
Sleep Mode 212 on both sides of the paper Defective flash detected [51] 256
conserving supplies 210 (duplexing) 93 delayed send
contacting customer support 315 on letterhead 91 fax options 128
content on transparencies 90 different paper sizes, copying 92
e‑mail settings 105 photos 90 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
content source placing separator sheets between fax setup 113
e‑mail settings 105 copies 95 digital telephone service
fax options 127 quick copy 89 fax setup 115
content type reducing 93 directory list
e‑mail settings 105 selecting a tray 92 printing 87
fax options 127 to a different size 91 Disk full 62 256
control panel, printer 15 using the ADF 89 Disk must be formatted for use in
indicator light 15 using the scanner glass 90 this device 256
Sleep button light 15 copying different paper sizes 92 disk wiping 217
controller board copying multiple pages on one display troubleshooting
accessing 29 sheet 95 printer display is blank 270
copies copying on both sides of the paper display, printer control panel 15
copy options 99 (duplexing) 93 adjusting brightness 214
copy job, canceling copying on transparencies 90 disposing of printer hard disk 216
using the ADF 97 creating a fax destination shortcut distinctive ring service, fax
using the scanner glass 97 using the Embedded Web connecting to 120
copy options Server 124 documents, printing
collate 99 creating an FTP shortcut from Macintosh 82
copies 99 using the Embedded Web from Windows 82
darkness 98 Server 130 DSL filter 113
save as shortcut 99 creating custom name duplexing 93
sides (duplex) 98 paper type 70

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 335

E Error reading USB drive. Remove configuring e‑mail settings 100

Eco‑Mode setting 211 USB. 257 creating shortcuts using the
Edit Security Setups menu 158 Error reading USB hub. Remove Embedded Web Server 101
Embedded Web Server hub. 257 creating shortcuts using the
accessing 13, 21 Ethernet network printer control panel 101
administrator settings 232 preparing to set up for Ethernet setting up e‑mail function 100
checking the status of parts 222 printing 50 using a shortcut number 102
checking the status of Ethernet network setup using the address book 103
supplies 222 using Macintosh 50 using the printer control
creating a fax destination using Windows 50 panel 102
shortcut 124 Ethernet networking
creating an FTP shortcut 130 Macintosh 50 F
creating e‑mail shortcuts 101 Windows 50 factory defaults
functions 13 Ethernet port 47 restoring 234
initial fax setup 108 Ethernet setup fax
modifying confidential print preparing for an 50 sending 122, 123
settings 86 exporting a configuration fax and e‑mail functions
networking settings 232 using the Embedded Web setting up 303
problem accessing 314 Server 26 fax and e‑mail functions are not set
scanning to a computer using 132 exterior of the printer up 303
setting up e‑mail alerts 232 cleaning 220 fax log
using 13 e‑mail viewing 125
Embedded Web Server — Security: canceling 104 Fax memory full 257
Administrator's Guide e‑mail alerts Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
where to find 232 low supply levels 232 menu 176
Embedded Web Server — Security: paper jam 232 fax name, setting 120
Administrator’s Guide setting up 232 fax number, setting 120
where to find 219 e‑mail function fax options
emission setting up 100 content source 127
notices 317, 321, 322, 326, 327 e‑mail options content type 127
encrypting the printer hard darkness 105 darkness 128
disk 218 message 104 delayed send 128
enlarging a copy 93 original size 104 page setup 128
envelopes page setup 106 resolution 128
loading, multipurpose feeder 64 recipient(s) 104 scan preview 128
tips on using 73 resolution 105 Fax partition inoperative. Contact
environmental settings send as 105 system administrator. 257
conserving supplies 210 subject 104 fax ports 47
display brightness, adjusting 214 e‑mail screen fax screen
Eco‑Mode 211 advanced options 106 advanced options 129
Hibernate Mode 213 options 104, 106 Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Hibernate Timeout 213 E‑mail Settings menu 184 Contact system administrator. 257
Quiet Mode 211 e‑mail shortcuts, creating fax setup
Schedule Power Modes 214 using the Embedded Web country‑ or region‑specific 116
Sleep Mode 212 Server 101 digital telephone service 115
Erase Temporary Data Files e‑mail, sending DSL connection 113
menu 161 using a shortcut number 102 standard telephone line
erasing hard disk memory 217 using the address book 103 connection 109
erasing non‑volatile memory 217 e‑mailing VoIP 114
erasing volatile memory 216 adding message line 103 Fax Station Name not set up.
adding subject line 103 Contact system administrator. 257
changing output file type 103

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 336

Fax Station Number not set up. font sample list HTML menu 207
Contact system administrator. 257 printing 87
fax troubleshooting Forms and Favorites I
caller ID is not shown 304 setting up 22 icons on the home screen
can receive but not send forwarding faxes 127 hiding 21
faxes 307 FTP showing 21
can send but not receive FTP options 135 Image menu 208
faxes 306 FTP address imaging unit
cannot send or receive a fax 304 creating shortcuts using the ordering 223
received fax has poor print printer control panel 131 replacing 226
quality 308 FTP address, scanning to Imaging unit low [84.xy] 257
faxing using a shortcut number 131 Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 258
blocking junk faxes 125 using the printer control Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
canceling a fax job 126 panel 131 pages remain [84.xy] 258
changing resolution 124 FTP options importing a configuration
configuring the printer to observe advanced options 137 using the Embedded Web
daylight saving time 121 FTP 135 Server 26
creating shortcuts using the FTP screen in finisher rear door
Embedded Web Server 124 advanced options 99 paper jams, clearing 247
creating shortcuts using the FTP Settings menu 189 Incompatible tray [x] [59] 258
printer control panel 124 Incorrect paper size, open [paper
distinctive ring service 120 G source] [34] 258
fax setup 108 General Settings menu 163 initial fax setup 108
forwarding faxes 127 green settings using the Embedded Web
holding faxes 126 Eco‑Mode 211 Server 108
making a fax lighter or darker 125 Hibernate Mode 213 inserting a header or footer 97
sending a fax at a scheduled Hibernate Timeout 213 installing an Internal Solutions
time 123 Quiet Mode 211 Port 33
sending using the printer control Schedule Power Modes 214 installing an optional card 32
panel 121 installing options
setting the date and time 121
setting the fax number 120
H order of installation 44
held jobs 85 installing printer hard disk 40
setting the outgoing fax name 120 installing printer on a network
viewing a fax log 125 printing from a Macintosh
computer 86 Ethernet networking 50
FCC notices 317, 322, 326 installing printer software
file name printing from Windows 86
Help menu 209 adding options 49
scan options 135 installing printer software
finding more information about the Hibernate Mode
using 213 (Windows) 48
printer 9 installing the 250‑sheet tray 44
finding printer IP address 21 Hibernate Timeout
setting 213 installing the 550‑sheet tray 44
finisher Insufficient memory for Flash
finishing features 80 hiding icons on the home screen 21
holding faxes 126 Memory Defragment operation
supported paper sizes 80 [37] 258
finisher features 80 home screen
customizing 21 Insufficient memory to collate job
Finishing menu 199 [37] 258
firmware card 28 hiding icons 21
showing icons 21 Insufficient memory to support
flash drive Resource Save feature [35] 259
printing from 83 home screen applications
configuring 22 Insufficient memory, some Held
Flash Drive menu 193 Jobs were deleted [37] 259
flash drives finding information 22
home screen buttons and icons Insufficient memory, some held
supported file types 84 jobs will not be restored [37] 259
description 16
internal options 28

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 337

Internal Solutions Port Load Manual Feeder with [paper Help 209
changing port settings 55 size] [paper orientation] 260 HTML 207
installing 33 Load manual feeder with [paper Image 208
troubleshooting 272 type] [paper size] [paper IPv6 153
IP address of computer orientation] 260 Job Accounting 202
finding 20 loading list of 138
IP address, printer multipurpose feeder 64 Miscellaneous Security
finding 21 trays 59 Settings 159
IPv6 menu 153 loading the optional tray 59 Network [x] 150
loading the standard tray 59 Network Card 152
J Network Reports 151
jams M Paper Loading 146
accessing 236 maintenance kit Paper Size/Type 139
avoiding 235 ordering 224 Paper Texture 143
understanding messages 236 Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 261 Paper Weight 144
jams, clearing Maintenance kit nearly low PCL Emul 205
finisher bin 247 [80.xy] 261 PDF 204
in automatic document feeder top Maintenance kit very low, [x] PostScript 204
cover 238 estimated pages remain Quality 201
in duplex area 243 [80.xy] 261 Reports 149
in front door 240 making copies using paper from Security Audit Log 161
in manual feeder 244 selected tray 92 Set Date/Time 162
in rear door 239 memory Settings 197
in standard bin 238 types installed on printer 216 SMTP Setup menu 157
in staple access door 247 memory card 28 Standard Network 150
in tray [x] 245 installing 30 Standard USB 155
Job Accounting menu 202 troubleshooting 272 Substitute Size 143
Memory full [38] 261 TCP/IP 152
Universal Setup 148
L Memory full, cannot print
Utilities 203
labels, paper faxes 261
Memory full, cannot send Wireless 154
tips 74 XPS 204
letterhead faxes 261
menu settings page message
copying on 91 e‑mail options 104
loading, multipurpose feeder 64 printing 58
menus Miscellaneous Security Settings
tips on using 73 menu 159
light, indicator 15 Active NIC 150
AppleTalk 155 mobile device
line filter 113 printing from 84
linking trays 70, 71 Confidential Print 160
Configure MP 142 moving the printer 10, 231
Load [paper source] with [custom Multi Send
string] [paper orientation] 259 Copy Settings 172
Custom Names 147 adding a profile 24
Load [paper source] with [custom setting up 24
type name] [paper orientation] 259 Custom Scan Sizes 148
Custom Types 147 multipurpose feeder
Load [paper source] with [paper loading 64
size] [paper orientation] 259 Default Source 139
Edit Security Setups 158 MyShortcut
Load [paper source] with [paper about 24
type] [paper size] [paper Erase Temporary Data Files 161
orientation] 260 E‑mail Settings 184
Load Manual Feeder with [custom Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 176 N
string] [paper orientation] 260 Finishing 199 Network [x] menu 150
Load Manual Feeder with [custom Flash Drive 193 Network [x] software error
type name] [paper orientation] 260 FTP Settings 189 [54] 261
General Settings 163 Network Card menu 152

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 338

Network Reports menu 151 output file type where to load 79

network settings changing 103 Paper Weight menu 144
Embedded Web Server 232 paper weights
network setup page P supported by printer 79
printing 58 page setup Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 263
Networking Guide e‑mail options 106 parts
where to find 232 fax options 128 checking status 222
No analog phone line connected to scan options 137 checking, from printer control
modem, fax is disabled. 262 paper panel 222
noise emission levels 317 characteristics 75 checking, using the Embedded
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see different sizes, copying 92 Web Server 222
User’s Guide [33.xy] 262 letterhead 76 using genuine Lexmark 222
non‑volatile memory 216 loading, multipurpose feeder 64 PCL Emul menu 205
erasing 217 preprinted forms 76 PDF menu 204
Not enough free space in flash recycled 77 Personal Identification Number
memory for resources [52] 262 saving 95 method
notices 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, selecting 76 using 53
322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328 storing 77 phone splitter 114
number of remaining pages unacceptable 76 photos
estimate 222 Universal size setting 59 copying 90
Paper changes needed 262 placing separator sheets between
O paper feed troubleshooting copies 95
optional card message remains after jam is port settings
installing 32 cleared 274 configuring 55
optional tray paper jams PostScript menu 204
loading 59 avoiding 235 preparing to set up the printer on
options paper jams, clearing an Ethernet network 50
250‑sheet tray, installing 44 finisher bin 247 print irregularities 288
550‑sheet tray, installing 44 in automatic document feeder top print job
firmware cards 28 cover 238 canceling, from computer 87
Internal Solutions Port, in duplex area 243 print quality
installing 33 in finisher rear door 247 cleaning the scanner glass 221
memory card 30 in front door 240 print quality troubleshooting
memory cards 28 in manual feeder 244 blank pages 282
printer hard disk, installing 40 in rear door 239 characters have jagged edges 281
printer hard disk, removing 43 in standard bin 238 clipped pages or images 283
updating in printer driver 49 in staple access door 247 gray background on prints 285
options, copy screen in tray [x] 245 horizontal voids appear on
copy from 98 paper labels prints 296
scale 98 loading, multipurpose feeder 64 print irregularities 288
options, touch‑screen Paper Loading menu 146 print is too dark 290
copy 98 paper size print is too light 291
e‑mail 104, 106 setting 59 printer is printing solid black
ordering Paper Size/Type menu 139 pages 293
imaging unit 223 paper sizes repeating print defects appear on
maintenance kit 224 supported 78 prints 289
staple cartridges 224 paper stop, using 69 shadow images appear on
ordering supplies Paper Texture menu 143 prints 284
toner cartridges 223 paper type skewed print 292
original size setting 59 streaked horizontal lines appear
e‑mail options 104 paper types on prints 294
scan options 135 supported by printer 79 streaked vertical lines 295

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 339

toner fog or background wiping 217 Configuration change, some held

shading 298 printer hard disk encryption 218 jobs were not restored [57] 256
toner rubs off 299 printer hard disk memory Defective flash detected [51] 256
toner specks appear on prints 298 erasing 217 Disk full 62 256
transparency print quality is printer information Disk must be formatted for use in
poor 294 where to find 9 this device 256
uneven print density 299 printer IP address Disk near full. Securely clearing
white streaks 297 finding 21 disk space. 256
print troubleshooting printer is printing blank pages 282 Error reading USB drive. Remove
error reading flash drive 275 printer messages USB. 257
held jobs do not print 277 [x]-page jam, remove all pages Error reading USB hub. Remove
incorrect characters print 279 from the output bin. Leave paper hub. 257
incorrect margins on prints 286 in bin. [45y.xx] 247 Fax memory full 257
jammed pages are not [x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. Fax partition inoperative. Contact
reprinted 274 [25y.xx] 244 system administrator. 257
job prints from wrong tray 279 [x]‑page jam, clear standard bin. Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
job prints on wrong paper 279 [20y.xx] 238 Contact system
jobs do not print 275 [x]‑page jam, open automatic administrator. 257
Large jobs do not collate 280 feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 238 Fax Station Name not set up.
multiple‑language PDF files do not [x]‑page jam, open front door. Contact system
print 274 [20y.xx] 240 administrator. 257
paper curl 287 [x]‑page jam, open rear door. Fax Station Number not set up.
paper frequently jams 273 [20y.xx] 239 Contact system
print job takes longer than [x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. administrator. 257
expected 278 [24y.xx] 245 Imaging unit low [84.xy] 257
tray linking does not work 280 [x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to Imaging unit nearly low
unexpected page breaks clear duplex. [23y.xx] 243 [84.xy] 258
occur 281 Cartridge low [88.xy] 253 Imaging unit very low, [x]
printer Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 254 estimated pages remain
basic model 11 Cartridge very low, [x] estimated [84.xy] 258
finishing features 80 pages remain [88.xy] 254 Incompatible tray [x] [59] 258
fully configured 11 Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch Incorrect paper size, open [paper
minimum clearances 10 [41.xy] 253 source] [34] 258
moving 10, 231 Change [paper source] to [custom Insufficient memory for Flash
selecting a location 10 string] load [orientation] 254 Memory Defragment operation
shipping 231 Change [paper source] to [custom [37] 258
printer configurations 11 type name] load Insufficient memory to collate job
printer control panel 15 [orientation] 254 [37] 258
factory defaults, restoring 234 Change [paper source] to [paper Insufficient memory to support
indicator light 15 size] load [orientation] 254 Resource Save feature [35] 259
Sleep button light 15 Change [paper source] to [paper Insufficient memory, some Held
printer control panel, virtual type] [paper size] load Jobs were deleted [37] 259
display [orientation] 254 Insufficient memory, some held
using the Embedded Web Check tray [x] connection 255 jobs will not be restored
Server 232 Close finisher rear door 255 [37] 259
Printer had to restart. Last job may Close flatbed cover and load Load [paper source] with [custom
be incomplete. 263 originals if restarting job string] [paper orientation] 259
printer hard disk [2yy.xx] 255 Load [paper source] with [custom
disposing of 216 Close front door 255 type name [paper
encrypting 218 Close rear door 255 orientation] 259
installing 40 Complex page, some data may not Load [paper source] with [paper
removing 43 have printed [39] 256 size] [paper orientation] 259

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 340

Load [paper source] with [paper Replace maintenance kit, 0 printer security
type] [paper size] [paper estimated pages remain information on 219
orientation] 260 [80.xy] 264 printer software, installing
Load Manual Feeder with [custom Replace unsupported cartridge (Windows) 48
string] [paper orientation] 260 [32.xy] 264 printing
Load Manual Feeder with [custom Replace unsupported imaging unit canceling, from the printer control
type name] [paper [32.xy] 265 panel 87
orientation] 260 Restore held jobs? 265 directory list 87
Load Manual Feeder with [paper Scanner automatic feeder cover font sample list 87
size] [paper orientation] 260 open 265 forms 82
Load manual feeder with [paper Scanner disabled by admin from a mobile device 84
type] [paper size] [paper [840.01] 265 from flash drive 83
orientation] 260 Scanner disabled. Contact system from Macintosh 82
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 261 administrator if problem persists. from Windows 82
Maintenance kit nearly low [840.02] 265 menu settings page 58
[80.xy] 261 Scanner jam, remove all originals network setup page 58
Maintenance kit very low, [x] from the scanner [2yy.xx] 265 printing a directory list 87
estimated pages remain Scanner jam, remove jammed printing a document 82
[80.xy] 261 originals from the scanner printing a font sample list 87
Memory full [38] 261 [2yy.xx] 265 printing a menu settings page 58
Memory full, cannot print Serial port [x] disabled [56] 265 printing a network setup page 58
faxes 261 SMTP server not set up. Contact printing confidential and other held
Memory full, cannot send system administrator. 266 jobs
faxes 261 Some held jobs were not from a Macintosh computer 86
Network [x] software error restored 266 from Windows 86
[54] 261 Standard network software error printing forms 82
No analog phone line connected [54] 266 printing from a flash drive 83
to modem, fax is disabled. 262 Standard USB port disabled printing from a mobile device 84
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see [56] 266 publications
User’s Guide [33.xy] 262 Supply needed to complete where to find 9
Not enough free space in flash job 266 Push Button Configuration method
memory for resources [52] 262 Too many flash options installed using 53
Paper changes needed 262 [58] 266
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 263 Too many trays attached [58] 267 Q
Printer had to restart. Last job Unformatted flash detected Quality menu 201
may be incomplete. 263 [53] 267 Quiet Mode 211
Reinstall missing or unresponsive Unsupported disk 267
cartridge [31.xy] 264 Unsupported option in slot [x]
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [55] 267
R
imaging unit [31.xy] 264 Unsupported USB hub, please recipient(s)
Remove defective disk [61] 263 remove 257 e‑mail options 104
Remove paper from standard USB port [x] disabled [56] 267 recycled paper
output bin 263 Weblink server not set up. Contact using 77
Replace all originals if restarting system administrator. 267 recycling
job. 264 printer options troubleshooting Lexmark packaging 215
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated internal option is not Lexmark products 215
pages remain [88.xy] 263 detected 270 toner cartridges 215
Replace defective imaging unit Internal Solutions Port 272 reducing a copy 93
[31.xy] 263 memory card 272 reducing noise 211
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated tray problems 271 Reinstall missing or unresponsive
pages remain [84.xy] 263 USB/parallel interface card 272 cartridge [31.xy] 264
printer problems, solving basic 268

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 341

Reinstall missing or unresponsive S copying using 90

imaging unit [31.xy] 264 safety information 7, 8 Scanner jam, remove all originals
Remote Operator Panel save as shortcut from the scanner [2yy.xx] 265
setting up 26 copy options 99 Scanner jam, remove jammed
Remove defective disk [61] 263 scan options 135 originals from the scanner
Remove paper from standard saving paper 95 [2yy.xx] 265
output bin 263 scan options scanning
removing printer hard disk 43 darkness 136 from a flash drive 134
repeat print jobs 85 file name 135 quick copy 89
printing from a Macintosh original size 135 to a computer 133
computer 86 page setup 137 to a computer using the
printing from Windows 86 resolution 136 Embedded Web Server 132
repeating print defects appear on save as shortcut 135 to an FTP address 131
prints 289 scan preview 137 scanning to a computer 133
Replace all originals if restarting send as 136 using the Embedded Web
job. 264 scan preview Server 132
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated fax options 128 scanning to a flash drive 134
pages remain [88.xy] 263 scan options 137 scanning to an FTP address
Replace defective imaging unit scan screen creating shortcuts using the
[31.xy] 263 content source 136 computer 130
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated content type 136 using a shortcut number 131
pages remain [84.xy] 263 Scan to Computer using the address book 131
Replace maintenance kit, 0 setting up 133 using the printer control
estimated pages remain Scan to Network panel 131
[80.xy] 264 setting up 25 scanning to network
Replace unsupported cartridge using 130 destinations 130
[32.xy] 264 scan troubleshooting Schedule Power Modes
Replace unsupported imaging unit cannot scan from a computer 313 using 214
[32.xy] 265 partial document or photo security
replacing scans 313 modifying confidential print
imaging unit 226 scan job was not successful 310 settings 86
toner cartridge 225 scanner unit does not Security Audit Log menu 161
replacing supplies close 300, 311 security slot 47
staple cartridge 229 scanning takes too long or freezes security Web page
replacing the staple cartridge 229 the computer 311 where to find 219
reports ScanBack Utility selecting a location for the
viewing 232 using 135 printer 10
Reports menu 149 scanner selecting paper 76
reserve print jobs 85 automatic document feeder send as
printing from a Macintosh (ADF) 14 e‑mail options 105
computer 86 functions 14 scan options 136
printing from Windows 86 scanner glass 14 sending a fax 122
resolution Scanner automatic feeder cover sending a fax using the printer
e‑mail options 105 open 265 control panel 121
fax options 128 Scanner disabled by admin sending an e‑mail using the printer
scan options 136 [840.01] 265 control panel 102
resolution, fax Scanner disabled. Contact system sending fax
changing 124 administrator if problem persists. using shortcuts 122
Restore held jobs? 265 [840.02] 265 using the address book 123
restoring factory default scanner glass sending fax at a scheduled
settings 234 cleaning 221 time 123
RJ‑11 adapter 116

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 342

sending fax using the address standard tray tips

book 123 loading 59 card stock 74
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 265 Standard USB menu 155 labels, paper 74
serial printing Standard USB port disabled letterhead 73
setting up 56 [56] 266 on using envelopes 73
Set Date/Time menu 162 staple cartridge transparencies 73
setting replacing 229 tips on using envelopes 73
TCP/IP address 152 staple cartridges toner cartridge
setting Hibernate Timeout 213 ordering 224 replacing 225
setting the fax number 120 statement of volatility 216 toner cartridges
setting the outgoing fax name 120 status of parts ordering 223
setting the paper size 59 checking 222 recycling 215
setting the paper type 59 status of supplies toner darkness
setting the Universal paper size 59 checking 222 adjusting 82
setting up e‑mail alerts 232 storing Too many flash options installed
setting up fax paper 77 [58] 266
country‑ or region‑specific 116 supplies 224 Too many trays attached [58] 267
digital telephone service 115 storing print jobs 85 touch screen
DSL connection 113 streaked horizontal lines appear on buttons 18
standard telephone line prints 294 transparencies
connection 109 streaked vertical lines appear on copying on 90
VoIP connection 114 prints 295 loading, multipurpose feeder 64
setting up fax and e‑mail streaks appear 297 tips 73
functions 303 subject and message information trays
setting up serial printing 56 adding to e‑mail 103 linking 70, 71
setting up the printer Substitute Size menu 143 loading 59
on an Ethernet network supplies unlinking 70, 71
(Macintosh only) 50 checking status 222 troubleshooting
on an Ethernet network (Windows checking, from printer control an application error has
only) 50 panel 222 occurred 314
Settings menu 197 checking, using the Embedded cannot open Embedded Web
shipping the printer 231 Web Server 222 Server 314
shortcuts, creating conserving 210 checking an unresponsive
e‑mail 101 storing 224 printer 268
fax destination 124 using genuine Lexmark 222 contacting customer support 315
FTP address 131 supplies, ordering fax and e‑mail functions are not
FTP destination 130 ADF separator roller 224 set up 303
showing icons on the home imaging unit 223 solving basic printer
screen 21 maintenance kit 224 problems 268
sides (duplex) staple cartridges 224 the scanner does not respond 309
copy options 98 toner cartridges 223 troubleshooting, color quality
Sleep Mode Supply needed to complete job 266 prints on color transparencies
adjusting 212 supply notifications appear dark when projected 284
SMTP server not set up. Contact configuring 233 troubleshooting, copy
system administrator. 266 supported flash drives 84 copier does not respond 300
SMTP Setup menu 157 supported paper sizes 78 partial document or photo
Some held jobs were not copies 302
restored 266 T poor copy quality 301
standard bin, using 69 TCP/IP menu 152 poor scanned image quality 312
Standard Network menu 150 telecommunication scanner unit does not
Standard network software error notices 322, 323, 324, 325 close 300, 311
54] 266 the scanner does not respond 309

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 Index 343

troubleshooting, display streaked horizontal lines appear using a shortcut number

printer display is blank 270 on prints 294 scanning to an FTP address 131
troubleshooting, fax streaked vertical lines 295 using Forms and Favorites 82
caller ID is not shown 304 toner fog or background using Hibernate Mode 213
can receive but not send shading 298 using Schedule Power Modes 214
faxes 307 toner rubs off 299 using shortcuts
can send but not receive toner specks appear on prints 298 sending fax 122
faxes 306 transparency print quality is using the address book 103
cannot send or receive a fax 304 poor 294 sending fax 123
received fax has poor print uneven print density 299 using the Embedded Web
quality 308 white streaks on a page 297 Server 13
troubleshooting, paper feed troubleshooting, printer options using the ScanBack Utility 135
message remains after jam is internal option is not using the touch‑screen buttons 18
cleared 274 detected 270 Utilities menu 203
troubleshooting, print Internal Solutions Port 272
error reading flash drive 275 memory card 272 V
held jobs do not print 277 tray problems 271 verify print jobs 85
incorrect characters print 279 USB/parallel interface card 272 printing from a Macintosh
incorrect margins on prints 286 troubleshooting, scan computer 86
jammed pages are not cannot scan from a computer 313 printing from Windows 86
reprinted 274 partial document or photo vertical voids appear 297
job prints from wrong tray 279 scans 313 viewing
job prints on wrong paper 279 scan job was not successful 310 reports 232
jobs do not print 275 scanner unit does not viewing a fax log 125
Large jobs do not collate 280 close 300, 311 virtual display
multiple‑language PDF files do not scanning takes too long or freezes checking, using Embedded Web
print 274 the computer 311 Server 232
paper curl 287 voice mail
paper frequently jams 273 U setting up 109
print job takes longer than unacceptable paper 76 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
expected 278 understanding the home screen fax setup 114
tray linking does not work 280 buttons and icons 16 voids appear 297
unexpected page breaks uneven print density 299 VoIP adapter 114
occur 281 Unformatted flash detected volatile memory 216
troubleshooting, print quality [53] 267 erasing 216
blank pages 282 Universal Paper Size volatility
characters have jagged edges 281 setting 59 statement of 216
clipped pages or images 283 Universal paper size
gray background on prints 285
horizontal voids appear on
setting 59 W
Universal Setup menu 148 Weblink server not set up. Contact
prints 296 unlinking trays 70, 71
print irregularities 288 system administrator. 267
Unsupported option in slot [x] wiping the printer hard disk 217
print is too dark 290 [55] 267
print is too light 291 Wireless menu 154
Unsupported USB hub, please wireless network
printer is printing solid black remove 257
pages 293 configuration information 52
updating options in printer wireless network setup
repeating print defects appear on driver 49
prints 289 using the Embedded Web
USB port 47 Server 54
shadow images appear on USB port [x] disabled [56] 267
prints 284 wireless setup wizard
USB/parallel interface card using 53
skewed print 292 troubleshooting 272

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Index 344

X
XPS menu 204